Upload
deadlyblessings
View
228
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 189
TE365F User Guide ENGLISH
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 289
Bluetooth QD ID B014200
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 389
LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT
1 WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERSLG offers you a limited warranty that the enclosed subscriber unit and its enclosed accessories will befree from defects in material and workmanship according to the following terms and conditions
1 The limited warranty for the product extends for ONE (1) year beginning on the date of purchase of the
product by the original end user2 The limited warranty extends only to the original end user of the product and is not assignable ortransferable to any subsequent purchaserend user
3 This warranty is good only to the original end user of the product during the warranty period as longas it is in Canada
4 Upon request from LG the consumer must provide information to reasonably prove the date of
purchase5 During the applicable warranty period LG will repair or replace at LGrsquos sole option without charge to
the original end user any defective component part of the phone or accessory
6 LG may use rebuilt reconditioned or new parts or components when repairing any product or replace aproduct with a rebuilt reconditioned or new product
2 WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER1 Defects or damages resulting from use of the product in other than its normal and customary manner
2 Defects or damages from abnormal use abnormal conditions improper storage exposure to moisture ordampness unauthorized modifications unauthorized connections unauthorized repair misuse neglectabuse accident alteration improper installation or other acts which are not the fault of LG includingdamage caused by spills of food or liquids
3 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material or workmanship
4 The fact that the Customer Service Department at LG was not notified by the original end user of thealleged defect or malfunction of the product during the warranty period
5 Products which have had their serial numbers removed or made illegible
6 Damage resulting from use of non-LG approved accessories
7 All plastic surfaces and all other externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to normalcustomer use
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 489
8 Products serviced by non-authorized persons or companies
Notes
1 This limited warranty supersedes all other warranties expressed or implied either in fact or byoperations of law statutory or otherwise including but not limited to any implied warranty ofmerchantability or fitness for a particular purpose
2 Shipping damage is the sole responsibility of the shipping company
3 EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY
No other express warranty is applicable to this productTHE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OFMARKETABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN LG ELECTRONICSCANADA INC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT INCONVENIENCELOSS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FOR ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY
INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT
4 HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICETo obtain warranty service please call the following telephone number from anywhere in Canada
LG Electronics Canada Inc
Tel 1-888-542-2623wwwlgca (see links to ldquoWireless Phone Servicerdquo)
Electronics Canada Inc
Mississauga Ontario
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 589
Some o the contents in thismanual may dier rom your phonedepending on the sotware o thephone or your service provider
TE365F User Guide
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 689
Contents
Guidelines or sae andef cient use 4
Getting to know yourphone 10
Open view 11
Installing the SIM card andbattery 13
Memory card 17
Your standby screen 19
General Functions 20Making a Call 20
Adjusting the Volume 21Answering a Call 21
Entering Text 22
In-Call Menu 25
During a Call 25Conerence Calls 26
Menu Tree 28
Fido Shop 30
Media 31Images 31
Sounds 31
Videos 31
Documents 31
Others 32
External memory 32
GamesampApps 33Games 33
Applications 33
Network prole 33
Call History 34All calls 34
Missed calls 34
Dialled calls 34
Received calls 34
Internet 35
Messages 36
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 789
Tools 45MP3 player 45
Camera 49
FM radio 55
Voice recorder 55
Alarm clock 56Calendar 56
Memo 57
Calculator 58
Stopwatch 58Unit converter 59
World clock 59
Contacts 60
Search 60New contact 60
Speed dials 60
Groups 60
Copy all 60
Delete all 61
Settings 61
Inormation 61
Settings 62
Fido IM 71
MobileMail 76
Communities77
PC Sync 78
Accessories 82
Trouble Shooting 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889
LG TE365F | User Guide4
G ui d el i n e s
Please read these simple guidelines
Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal
Exposure to radio frequencyenergy
Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with
applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the
saety o all persons regardless o age and health
bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest
certiied power level in all usedrequency bands
bull While there may be dierences
between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio
wavesbull The highest SAR value or this
model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described
in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada
Body on Operation
This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body
Additionally belt clips holsters amp
other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989
5
G ui d el i n e s
Caution amp Notice
Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions
(1) this device may not causeintererence and
(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice
Product care andmaintenance
WARNING
Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other
types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous
bull Do not disassemble this unit Take
it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required
bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and
personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom
heat sources such as radiators orcookers
bull Do not drop
bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock
bull Switch o the phone in any area
where you are required by special
regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may
aect sensitive medical equipment
bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It
may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone
bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset
can become hot and create a irehazard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189
7
G ui d el i n e s
bull Pull o the road and park beore
making or answering a call i driving conditions so require
bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle
such as car stereos and saetyequipment
bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless
equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance
bull I you are listening to music whilst
out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads
Avoid damage to yourhearing
Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore
recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel
Glass Parts
Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device
is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289
LG TE365F | User Guide8
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
G ui d el i n e s
Blasting area
Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules
Potentially explosiveatmospheres
bull Do not use the phone at areueling point
bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store
lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories
In aircraft
Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat
bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat
bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew
Children
Keep the phone in a sae place
out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency
calls Check with your local serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389
9
G ui d el i n e s
Battery information and care
bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory
eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance
bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie
bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack
bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean
bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing
bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability
bull Do not expose the battery charger
to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom
bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate
the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the
battery is replaced by an incorrecttype
bull Dispose o used batteries
according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste
bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance
bull Always unplug the charger rom
the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489
LG TE365F | User Guide10
Getting to know your phone
Main screen
OK key
Left soft key
Go to the Emaildirectly
Call keyDials a phonenumber and
answersincoming calls
Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key
Navigation keysbull In standby mode
Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages
Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus
Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly
EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu
Clear key
Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen
Volume key
bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume
when it sets as General mode
Camera
Chargercablehandsfreeconnector
Memorycard slot
G e t t i n g t ok
n ow
y o ur ph on
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589
11
Open view
Left soft keyRight soft key
Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly
Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock
keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter
Change the text mode
(Capital Small)
Alpha numeric keys
Space KeyUse to enter space
while editingEnter key
OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions
Clear keybull Clears a
character witheach press
Hold the keydown to clearall inputs
bull Use this keyto go back to a previous
screen
Messagekey
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 289
Bluetooth QD ID B014200
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 389
LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT
1 WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERSLG offers you a limited warranty that the enclosed subscriber unit and its enclosed accessories will befree from defects in material and workmanship according to the following terms and conditions
1 The limited warranty for the product extends for ONE (1) year beginning on the date of purchase of the
product by the original end user2 The limited warranty extends only to the original end user of the product and is not assignable ortransferable to any subsequent purchaserend user
3 This warranty is good only to the original end user of the product during the warranty period as longas it is in Canada
4 Upon request from LG the consumer must provide information to reasonably prove the date of
purchase5 During the applicable warranty period LG will repair or replace at LGrsquos sole option without charge to
the original end user any defective component part of the phone or accessory
6 LG may use rebuilt reconditioned or new parts or components when repairing any product or replace aproduct with a rebuilt reconditioned or new product
2 WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER1 Defects or damages resulting from use of the product in other than its normal and customary manner
2 Defects or damages from abnormal use abnormal conditions improper storage exposure to moisture ordampness unauthorized modifications unauthorized connections unauthorized repair misuse neglectabuse accident alteration improper installation or other acts which are not the fault of LG includingdamage caused by spills of food or liquids
3 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material or workmanship
4 The fact that the Customer Service Department at LG was not notified by the original end user of thealleged defect or malfunction of the product during the warranty period
5 Products which have had their serial numbers removed or made illegible
6 Damage resulting from use of non-LG approved accessories
7 All plastic surfaces and all other externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to normalcustomer use
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 489
8 Products serviced by non-authorized persons or companies
Notes
1 This limited warranty supersedes all other warranties expressed or implied either in fact or byoperations of law statutory or otherwise including but not limited to any implied warranty ofmerchantability or fitness for a particular purpose
2 Shipping damage is the sole responsibility of the shipping company
3 EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY
No other express warranty is applicable to this productTHE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OFMARKETABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN LG ELECTRONICSCANADA INC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT INCONVENIENCELOSS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FOR ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY
INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT
4 HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICETo obtain warranty service please call the following telephone number from anywhere in Canada
LG Electronics Canada Inc
Tel 1-888-542-2623wwwlgca (see links to ldquoWireless Phone Servicerdquo)
Electronics Canada Inc
Mississauga Ontario
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 589
Some o the contents in thismanual may dier rom your phonedepending on the sotware o thephone or your service provider
TE365F User Guide
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 689
Contents
Guidelines or sae andef cient use 4
Getting to know yourphone 10
Open view 11
Installing the SIM card andbattery 13
Memory card 17
Your standby screen 19
General Functions 20Making a Call 20
Adjusting the Volume 21Answering a Call 21
Entering Text 22
In-Call Menu 25
During a Call 25Conerence Calls 26
Menu Tree 28
Fido Shop 30
Media 31Images 31
Sounds 31
Videos 31
Documents 31
Others 32
External memory 32
GamesampApps 33Games 33
Applications 33
Network prole 33
Call History 34All calls 34
Missed calls 34
Dialled calls 34
Received calls 34
Internet 35
Messages 36
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 789
Tools 45MP3 player 45
Camera 49
FM radio 55
Voice recorder 55
Alarm clock 56Calendar 56
Memo 57
Calculator 58
Stopwatch 58Unit converter 59
World clock 59
Contacts 60
Search 60New contact 60
Speed dials 60
Groups 60
Copy all 60
Delete all 61
Settings 61
Inormation 61
Settings 62
Fido IM 71
MobileMail 76
Communities77
PC Sync 78
Accessories 82
Trouble Shooting 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889
LG TE365F | User Guide4
G ui d el i n e s
Please read these simple guidelines
Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal
Exposure to radio frequencyenergy
Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with
applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the
saety o all persons regardless o age and health
bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest
certiied power level in all usedrequency bands
bull While there may be dierences
between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio
wavesbull The highest SAR value or this
model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described
in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada
Body on Operation
This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body
Additionally belt clips holsters amp
other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989
5
G ui d el i n e s
Caution amp Notice
Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions
(1) this device may not causeintererence and
(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice
Product care andmaintenance
WARNING
Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other
types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous
bull Do not disassemble this unit Take
it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required
bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and
personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom
heat sources such as radiators orcookers
bull Do not drop
bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock
bull Switch o the phone in any area
where you are required by special
regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may
aect sensitive medical equipment
bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It
may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone
bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset
can become hot and create a irehazard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189
7
G ui d el i n e s
bull Pull o the road and park beore
making or answering a call i driving conditions so require
bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle
such as car stereos and saetyequipment
bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless
equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance
bull I you are listening to music whilst
out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads
Avoid damage to yourhearing
Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore
recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel
Glass Parts
Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device
is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289
LG TE365F | User Guide8
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
G ui d el i n e s
Blasting area
Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules
Potentially explosiveatmospheres
bull Do not use the phone at areueling point
bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store
lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories
In aircraft
Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat
bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat
bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew
Children
Keep the phone in a sae place
out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency
calls Check with your local serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389
9
G ui d el i n e s
Battery information and care
bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory
eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance
bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie
bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack
bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean
bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing
bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability
bull Do not expose the battery charger
to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom
bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate
the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the
battery is replaced by an incorrecttype
bull Dispose o used batteries
according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste
bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance
bull Always unplug the charger rom
the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489
LG TE365F | User Guide10
Getting to know your phone
Main screen
OK key
Left soft key
Go to the Emaildirectly
Call keyDials a phonenumber and
answersincoming calls
Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key
Navigation keysbull In standby mode
Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages
Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus
Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly
EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu
Clear key
Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen
Volume key
bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume
when it sets as General mode
Camera
Chargercablehandsfreeconnector
Memorycard slot
G e t t i n g t ok
n ow
y o ur ph on
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589
11
Open view
Left soft keyRight soft key
Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly
Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock
keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter
Change the text mode
(Capital Small)
Alpha numeric keys
Space KeyUse to enter space
while editingEnter key
OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions
Clear keybull Clears a
character witheach press
Hold the keydown to clearall inputs
bull Use this keyto go back to a previous
screen
Messagekey
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 389
LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT
1 WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERSLG offers you a limited warranty that the enclosed subscriber unit and its enclosed accessories will befree from defects in material and workmanship according to the following terms and conditions
1 The limited warranty for the product extends for ONE (1) year beginning on the date of purchase of the
product by the original end user2 The limited warranty extends only to the original end user of the product and is not assignable ortransferable to any subsequent purchaserend user
3 This warranty is good only to the original end user of the product during the warranty period as longas it is in Canada
4 Upon request from LG the consumer must provide information to reasonably prove the date of
purchase5 During the applicable warranty period LG will repair or replace at LGrsquos sole option without charge to
the original end user any defective component part of the phone or accessory
6 LG may use rebuilt reconditioned or new parts or components when repairing any product or replace aproduct with a rebuilt reconditioned or new product
2 WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER1 Defects or damages resulting from use of the product in other than its normal and customary manner
2 Defects or damages from abnormal use abnormal conditions improper storage exposure to moisture ordampness unauthorized modifications unauthorized connections unauthorized repair misuse neglectabuse accident alteration improper installation or other acts which are not the fault of LG includingdamage caused by spills of food or liquids
3 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material or workmanship
4 The fact that the Customer Service Department at LG was not notified by the original end user of thealleged defect or malfunction of the product during the warranty period
5 Products which have had their serial numbers removed or made illegible
6 Damage resulting from use of non-LG approved accessories
7 All plastic surfaces and all other externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to normalcustomer use
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 489
8 Products serviced by non-authorized persons or companies
Notes
1 This limited warranty supersedes all other warranties expressed or implied either in fact or byoperations of law statutory or otherwise including but not limited to any implied warranty ofmerchantability or fitness for a particular purpose
2 Shipping damage is the sole responsibility of the shipping company
3 EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY
No other express warranty is applicable to this productTHE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OFMARKETABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN LG ELECTRONICSCANADA INC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT INCONVENIENCELOSS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FOR ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY
INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT
4 HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICETo obtain warranty service please call the following telephone number from anywhere in Canada
LG Electronics Canada Inc
Tel 1-888-542-2623wwwlgca (see links to ldquoWireless Phone Servicerdquo)
Electronics Canada Inc
Mississauga Ontario
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 589
Some o the contents in thismanual may dier rom your phonedepending on the sotware o thephone or your service provider
TE365F User Guide
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 689
Contents
Guidelines or sae andef cient use 4
Getting to know yourphone 10
Open view 11
Installing the SIM card andbattery 13
Memory card 17
Your standby screen 19
General Functions 20Making a Call 20
Adjusting the Volume 21Answering a Call 21
Entering Text 22
In-Call Menu 25
During a Call 25Conerence Calls 26
Menu Tree 28
Fido Shop 30
Media 31Images 31
Sounds 31
Videos 31
Documents 31
Others 32
External memory 32
GamesampApps 33Games 33
Applications 33
Network prole 33
Call History 34All calls 34
Missed calls 34
Dialled calls 34
Received calls 34
Internet 35
Messages 36
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 789
Tools 45MP3 player 45
Camera 49
FM radio 55
Voice recorder 55
Alarm clock 56Calendar 56
Memo 57
Calculator 58
Stopwatch 58Unit converter 59
World clock 59
Contacts 60
Search 60New contact 60
Speed dials 60
Groups 60
Copy all 60
Delete all 61
Settings 61
Inormation 61
Settings 62
Fido IM 71
MobileMail 76
Communities77
PC Sync 78
Accessories 82
Trouble Shooting 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889
LG TE365F | User Guide4
G ui d el i n e s
Please read these simple guidelines
Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal
Exposure to radio frequencyenergy
Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with
applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the
saety o all persons regardless o age and health
bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest
certiied power level in all usedrequency bands
bull While there may be dierences
between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio
wavesbull The highest SAR value or this
model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described
in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada
Body on Operation
This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body
Additionally belt clips holsters amp
other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989
5
G ui d el i n e s
Caution amp Notice
Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions
(1) this device may not causeintererence and
(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice
Product care andmaintenance
WARNING
Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other
types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous
bull Do not disassemble this unit Take
it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required
bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and
personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom
heat sources such as radiators orcookers
bull Do not drop
bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock
bull Switch o the phone in any area
where you are required by special
regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may
aect sensitive medical equipment
bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It
may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone
bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset
can become hot and create a irehazard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189
7
G ui d el i n e s
bull Pull o the road and park beore
making or answering a call i driving conditions so require
bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle
such as car stereos and saetyequipment
bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless
equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance
bull I you are listening to music whilst
out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads
Avoid damage to yourhearing
Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore
recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel
Glass Parts
Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device
is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289
LG TE365F | User Guide8
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
G ui d el i n e s
Blasting area
Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules
Potentially explosiveatmospheres
bull Do not use the phone at areueling point
bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store
lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories
In aircraft
Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat
bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat
bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew
Children
Keep the phone in a sae place
out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency
calls Check with your local serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389
9
G ui d el i n e s
Battery information and care
bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory
eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance
bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie
bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack
bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean
bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing
bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability
bull Do not expose the battery charger
to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom
bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate
the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the
battery is replaced by an incorrecttype
bull Dispose o used batteries
according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste
bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance
bull Always unplug the charger rom
the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489
LG TE365F | User Guide10
Getting to know your phone
Main screen
OK key
Left soft key
Go to the Emaildirectly
Call keyDials a phonenumber and
answersincoming calls
Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key
Navigation keysbull In standby mode
Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages
Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus
Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly
EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu
Clear key
Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen
Volume key
bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume
when it sets as General mode
Camera
Chargercablehandsfreeconnector
Memorycard slot
G e t t i n g t ok
n ow
y o ur ph on
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589
11
Open view
Left soft keyRight soft key
Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly
Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock
keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter
Change the text mode
(Capital Small)
Alpha numeric keys
Space KeyUse to enter space
while editingEnter key
OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions
Clear keybull Clears a
character witheach press
Hold the keydown to clearall inputs
bull Use this keyto go back to a previous
screen
Messagekey
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 489
8 Products serviced by non-authorized persons or companies
Notes
1 This limited warranty supersedes all other warranties expressed or implied either in fact or byoperations of law statutory or otherwise including but not limited to any implied warranty ofmerchantability or fitness for a particular purpose
2 Shipping damage is the sole responsibility of the shipping company
3 EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY
No other express warranty is applicable to this productTHE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OFMARKETABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN LG ELECTRONICSCANADA INC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT INCONVENIENCELOSS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FOR ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY
INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT
4 HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICETo obtain warranty service please call the following telephone number from anywhere in Canada
LG Electronics Canada Inc
Tel 1-888-542-2623wwwlgca (see links to ldquoWireless Phone Servicerdquo)
Electronics Canada Inc
Mississauga Ontario
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 589
Some o the contents in thismanual may dier rom your phonedepending on the sotware o thephone or your service provider
TE365F User Guide
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 689
Contents
Guidelines or sae andef cient use 4
Getting to know yourphone 10
Open view 11
Installing the SIM card andbattery 13
Memory card 17
Your standby screen 19
General Functions 20Making a Call 20
Adjusting the Volume 21Answering a Call 21
Entering Text 22
In-Call Menu 25
During a Call 25Conerence Calls 26
Menu Tree 28
Fido Shop 30
Media 31Images 31
Sounds 31
Videos 31
Documents 31
Others 32
External memory 32
GamesampApps 33Games 33
Applications 33
Network prole 33
Call History 34All calls 34
Missed calls 34
Dialled calls 34
Received calls 34
Internet 35
Messages 36
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 789
Tools 45MP3 player 45
Camera 49
FM radio 55
Voice recorder 55
Alarm clock 56Calendar 56
Memo 57
Calculator 58
Stopwatch 58Unit converter 59
World clock 59
Contacts 60
Search 60New contact 60
Speed dials 60
Groups 60
Copy all 60
Delete all 61
Settings 61
Inormation 61
Settings 62
Fido IM 71
MobileMail 76
Communities77
PC Sync 78
Accessories 82
Trouble Shooting 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889
LG TE365F | User Guide4
G ui d el i n e s
Please read these simple guidelines
Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal
Exposure to radio frequencyenergy
Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with
applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the
saety o all persons regardless o age and health
bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest
certiied power level in all usedrequency bands
bull While there may be dierences
between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio
wavesbull The highest SAR value or this
model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described
in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada
Body on Operation
This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body
Additionally belt clips holsters amp
other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989
5
G ui d el i n e s
Caution amp Notice
Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions
(1) this device may not causeintererence and
(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice
Product care andmaintenance
WARNING
Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other
types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous
bull Do not disassemble this unit Take
it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required
bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and
personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom
heat sources such as radiators orcookers
bull Do not drop
bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock
bull Switch o the phone in any area
where you are required by special
regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may
aect sensitive medical equipment
bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It
may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone
bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset
can become hot and create a irehazard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189
7
G ui d el i n e s
bull Pull o the road and park beore
making or answering a call i driving conditions so require
bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle
such as car stereos and saetyequipment
bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless
equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance
bull I you are listening to music whilst
out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads
Avoid damage to yourhearing
Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore
recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel
Glass Parts
Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device
is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289
LG TE365F | User Guide8
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
G ui d el i n e s
Blasting area
Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules
Potentially explosiveatmospheres
bull Do not use the phone at areueling point
bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store
lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories
In aircraft
Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat
bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat
bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew
Children
Keep the phone in a sae place
out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency
calls Check with your local serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389
9
G ui d el i n e s
Battery information and care
bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory
eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance
bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie
bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack
bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean
bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing
bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability
bull Do not expose the battery charger
to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom
bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate
the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the
battery is replaced by an incorrecttype
bull Dispose o used batteries
according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste
bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance
bull Always unplug the charger rom
the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489
LG TE365F | User Guide10
Getting to know your phone
Main screen
OK key
Left soft key
Go to the Emaildirectly
Call keyDials a phonenumber and
answersincoming calls
Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key
Navigation keysbull In standby mode
Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages
Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus
Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly
EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu
Clear key
Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen
Volume key
bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume
when it sets as General mode
Camera
Chargercablehandsfreeconnector
Memorycard slot
G e t t i n g t ok
n ow
y o ur ph on
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589
11
Open view
Left soft keyRight soft key
Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly
Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock
keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter
Change the text mode
(Capital Small)
Alpha numeric keys
Space KeyUse to enter space
while editingEnter key
OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions
Clear keybull Clears a
character witheach press
Hold the keydown to clearall inputs
bull Use this keyto go back to a previous
screen
Messagekey
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 589
Some o the contents in thismanual may dier rom your phonedepending on the sotware o thephone or your service provider
TE365F User Guide
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 689
Contents
Guidelines or sae andef cient use 4
Getting to know yourphone 10
Open view 11
Installing the SIM card andbattery 13
Memory card 17
Your standby screen 19
General Functions 20Making a Call 20
Adjusting the Volume 21Answering a Call 21
Entering Text 22
In-Call Menu 25
During a Call 25Conerence Calls 26
Menu Tree 28
Fido Shop 30
Media 31Images 31
Sounds 31
Videos 31
Documents 31
Others 32
External memory 32
GamesampApps 33Games 33
Applications 33
Network prole 33
Call History 34All calls 34
Missed calls 34
Dialled calls 34
Received calls 34
Internet 35
Messages 36
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 789
Tools 45MP3 player 45
Camera 49
FM radio 55
Voice recorder 55
Alarm clock 56Calendar 56
Memo 57
Calculator 58
Stopwatch 58Unit converter 59
World clock 59
Contacts 60
Search 60New contact 60
Speed dials 60
Groups 60
Copy all 60
Delete all 61
Settings 61
Inormation 61
Settings 62
Fido IM 71
MobileMail 76
Communities77
PC Sync 78
Accessories 82
Trouble Shooting 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889
LG TE365F | User Guide4
G ui d el i n e s
Please read these simple guidelines
Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal
Exposure to radio frequencyenergy
Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with
applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the
saety o all persons regardless o age and health
bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest
certiied power level in all usedrequency bands
bull While there may be dierences
between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio
wavesbull The highest SAR value or this
model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described
in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada
Body on Operation
This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body
Additionally belt clips holsters amp
other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989
5
G ui d el i n e s
Caution amp Notice
Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions
(1) this device may not causeintererence and
(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice
Product care andmaintenance
WARNING
Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other
types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous
bull Do not disassemble this unit Take
it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required
bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and
personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom
heat sources such as radiators orcookers
bull Do not drop
bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock
bull Switch o the phone in any area
where you are required by special
regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may
aect sensitive medical equipment
bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It
may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone
bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset
can become hot and create a irehazard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189
7
G ui d el i n e s
bull Pull o the road and park beore
making or answering a call i driving conditions so require
bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle
such as car stereos and saetyequipment
bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless
equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance
bull I you are listening to music whilst
out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads
Avoid damage to yourhearing
Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore
recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel
Glass Parts
Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device
is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289
LG TE365F | User Guide8
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
G ui d el i n e s
Blasting area
Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules
Potentially explosiveatmospheres
bull Do not use the phone at areueling point
bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store
lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories
In aircraft
Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat
bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat
bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew
Children
Keep the phone in a sae place
out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency
calls Check with your local serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389
9
G ui d el i n e s
Battery information and care
bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory
eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance
bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie
bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack
bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean
bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing
bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability
bull Do not expose the battery charger
to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom
bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate
the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the
battery is replaced by an incorrecttype
bull Dispose o used batteries
according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste
bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance
bull Always unplug the charger rom
the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489
LG TE365F | User Guide10
Getting to know your phone
Main screen
OK key
Left soft key
Go to the Emaildirectly
Call keyDials a phonenumber and
answersincoming calls
Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key
Navigation keysbull In standby mode
Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages
Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus
Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly
EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu
Clear key
Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen
Volume key
bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume
when it sets as General mode
Camera
Chargercablehandsfreeconnector
Memorycard slot
G e t t i n g t ok
n ow
y o ur ph on
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589
11
Open view
Left soft keyRight soft key
Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly
Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock
keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter
Change the text mode
(Capital Small)
Alpha numeric keys
Space KeyUse to enter space
while editingEnter key
OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions
Clear keybull Clears a
character witheach press
Hold the keydown to clearall inputs
bull Use this keyto go back to a previous
screen
Messagekey
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 689
Contents
Guidelines or sae andef cient use 4
Getting to know yourphone 10
Open view 11
Installing the SIM card andbattery 13
Memory card 17
Your standby screen 19
General Functions 20Making a Call 20
Adjusting the Volume 21Answering a Call 21
Entering Text 22
In-Call Menu 25
During a Call 25Conerence Calls 26
Menu Tree 28
Fido Shop 30
Media 31Images 31
Sounds 31
Videos 31
Documents 31
Others 32
External memory 32
GamesampApps 33Games 33
Applications 33
Network prole 33
Call History 34All calls 34
Missed calls 34
Dialled calls 34
Received calls 34
Internet 35
Messages 36
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 789
Tools 45MP3 player 45
Camera 49
FM radio 55
Voice recorder 55
Alarm clock 56Calendar 56
Memo 57
Calculator 58
Stopwatch 58Unit converter 59
World clock 59
Contacts 60
Search 60New contact 60
Speed dials 60
Groups 60
Copy all 60
Delete all 61
Settings 61
Inormation 61
Settings 62
Fido IM 71
MobileMail 76
Communities77
PC Sync 78
Accessories 82
Trouble Shooting 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889
LG TE365F | User Guide4
G ui d el i n e s
Please read these simple guidelines
Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal
Exposure to radio frequencyenergy
Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with
applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the
saety o all persons regardless o age and health
bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest
certiied power level in all usedrequency bands
bull While there may be dierences
between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio
wavesbull The highest SAR value or this
model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described
in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada
Body on Operation
This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body
Additionally belt clips holsters amp
other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989
5
G ui d el i n e s
Caution amp Notice
Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions
(1) this device may not causeintererence and
(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice
Product care andmaintenance
WARNING
Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other
types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous
bull Do not disassemble this unit Take
it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required
bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and
personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom
heat sources such as radiators orcookers
bull Do not drop
bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock
bull Switch o the phone in any area
where you are required by special
regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may
aect sensitive medical equipment
bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It
may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone
bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset
can become hot and create a irehazard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189
7
G ui d el i n e s
bull Pull o the road and park beore
making or answering a call i driving conditions so require
bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle
such as car stereos and saetyequipment
bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless
equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance
bull I you are listening to music whilst
out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads
Avoid damage to yourhearing
Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore
recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel
Glass Parts
Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device
is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289
LG TE365F | User Guide8
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
G ui d el i n e s
Blasting area
Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules
Potentially explosiveatmospheres
bull Do not use the phone at areueling point
bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store
lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories
In aircraft
Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat
bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat
bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew
Children
Keep the phone in a sae place
out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency
calls Check with your local serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389
9
G ui d el i n e s
Battery information and care
bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory
eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance
bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie
bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack
bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean
bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing
bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability
bull Do not expose the battery charger
to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom
bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate
the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the
battery is replaced by an incorrecttype
bull Dispose o used batteries
according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste
bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance
bull Always unplug the charger rom
the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489
LG TE365F | User Guide10
Getting to know your phone
Main screen
OK key
Left soft key
Go to the Emaildirectly
Call keyDials a phonenumber and
answersincoming calls
Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key
Navigation keysbull In standby mode
Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages
Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus
Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly
EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu
Clear key
Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen
Volume key
bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume
when it sets as General mode
Camera
Chargercablehandsfreeconnector
Memorycard slot
G e t t i n g t ok
n ow
y o ur ph on
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589
11
Open view
Left soft keyRight soft key
Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly
Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock
keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter
Change the text mode
(Capital Small)
Alpha numeric keys
Space KeyUse to enter space
while editingEnter key
OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions
Clear keybull Clears a
character witheach press
Hold the keydown to clearall inputs
bull Use this keyto go back to a previous
screen
Messagekey
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 789
Tools 45MP3 player 45
Camera 49
FM radio 55
Voice recorder 55
Alarm clock 56Calendar 56
Memo 57
Calculator 58
Stopwatch 58Unit converter 59
World clock 59
Contacts 60
Search 60New contact 60
Speed dials 60
Groups 60
Copy all 60
Delete all 61
Settings 61
Inormation 61
Settings 62
Fido IM 71
MobileMail 76
Communities77
PC Sync 78
Accessories 82
Trouble Shooting 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889
LG TE365F | User Guide4
G ui d el i n e s
Please read these simple guidelines
Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal
Exposure to radio frequencyenergy
Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with
applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the
saety o all persons regardless o age and health
bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest
certiied power level in all usedrequency bands
bull While there may be dierences
between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio
wavesbull The highest SAR value or this
model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described
in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada
Body on Operation
This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body
Additionally belt clips holsters amp
other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989
5
G ui d el i n e s
Caution amp Notice
Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions
(1) this device may not causeintererence and
(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice
Product care andmaintenance
WARNING
Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other
types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous
bull Do not disassemble this unit Take
it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required
bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and
personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom
heat sources such as radiators orcookers
bull Do not drop
bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock
bull Switch o the phone in any area
where you are required by special
regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may
aect sensitive medical equipment
bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It
may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone
bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset
can become hot and create a irehazard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189
7
G ui d el i n e s
bull Pull o the road and park beore
making or answering a call i driving conditions so require
bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle
such as car stereos and saetyequipment
bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless
equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance
bull I you are listening to music whilst
out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads
Avoid damage to yourhearing
Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore
recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel
Glass Parts
Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device
is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289
LG TE365F | User Guide8
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
G ui d el i n e s
Blasting area
Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules
Potentially explosiveatmospheres
bull Do not use the phone at areueling point
bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store
lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories
In aircraft
Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat
bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat
bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew
Children
Keep the phone in a sae place
out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency
calls Check with your local serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389
9
G ui d el i n e s
Battery information and care
bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory
eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance
bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie
bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack
bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean
bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing
bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability
bull Do not expose the battery charger
to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom
bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate
the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the
battery is replaced by an incorrecttype
bull Dispose o used batteries
according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste
bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance
bull Always unplug the charger rom
the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489
LG TE365F | User Guide10
Getting to know your phone
Main screen
OK key
Left soft key
Go to the Emaildirectly
Call keyDials a phonenumber and
answersincoming calls
Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key
Navigation keysbull In standby mode
Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages
Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus
Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly
EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu
Clear key
Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen
Volume key
bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume
when it sets as General mode
Camera
Chargercablehandsfreeconnector
Memorycard slot
G e t t i n g t ok
n ow
y o ur ph on
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589
11
Open view
Left soft keyRight soft key
Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly
Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock
keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter
Change the text mode
(Capital Small)
Alpha numeric keys
Space KeyUse to enter space
while editingEnter key
OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions
Clear keybull Clears a
character witheach press
Hold the keydown to clearall inputs
bull Use this keyto go back to a previous
screen
Messagekey
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889
LG TE365F | User Guide4
G ui d el i n e s
Please read these simple guidelines
Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal
Exposure to radio frequencyenergy
Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with
applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the
saety o all persons regardless o age and health
bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest
certiied power level in all usedrequency bands
bull While there may be dierences
between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio
wavesbull The highest SAR value or this
model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described
in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada
Body on Operation
This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body
Additionally belt clips holsters amp
other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989
5
G ui d el i n e s
Caution amp Notice
Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions
(1) this device may not causeintererence and
(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice
Product care andmaintenance
WARNING
Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other
types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous
bull Do not disassemble this unit Take
it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required
bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and
personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom
heat sources such as radiators orcookers
bull Do not drop
bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock
bull Switch o the phone in any area
where you are required by special
regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may
aect sensitive medical equipment
bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It
may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone
bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset
can become hot and create a irehazard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189
7
G ui d el i n e s
bull Pull o the road and park beore
making or answering a call i driving conditions so require
bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle
such as car stereos and saetyequipment
bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless
equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance
bull I you are listening to music whilst
out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads
Avoid damage to yourhearing
Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore
recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel
Glass Parts
Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device
is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289
LG TE365F | User Guide8
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
G ui d el i n e s
Blasting area
Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules
Potentially explosiveatmospheres
bull Do not use the phone at areueling point
bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store
lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories
In aircraft
Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat
bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat
bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew
Children
Keep the phone in a sae place
out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency
calls Check with your local serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389
9
G ui d el i n e s
Battery information and care
bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory
eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance
bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie
bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack
bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean
bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing
bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability
bull Do not expose the battery charger
to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom
bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate
the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the
battery is replaced by an incorrecttype
bull Dispose o used batteries
according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste
bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance
bull Always unplug the charger rom
the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489
LG TE365F | User Guide10
Getting to know your phone
Main screen
OK key
Left soft key
Go to the Emaildirectly
Call keyDials a phonenumber and
answersincoming calls
Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key
Navigation keysbull In standby mode
Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages
Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus
Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly
EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu
Clear key
Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen
Volume key
bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume
when it sets as General mode
Camera
Chargercablehandsfreeconnector
Memorycard slot
G e t t i n g t ok
n ow
y o ur ph on
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589
11
Open view
Left soft keyRight soft key
Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly
Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock
keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter
Change the text mode
(Capital Small)
Alpha numeric keys
Space KeyUse to enter space
while editingEnter key
OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions
Clear keybull Clears a
character witheach press
Hold the keydown to clearall inputs
bull Use this keyto go back to a previous
screen
Messagekey
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989
5
G ui d el i n e s
Caution amp Notice
Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions
(1) this device may not causeintererence and
(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice
Product care andmaintenance
WARNING
Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other
types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous
bull Do not disassemble this unit Take
it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required
bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and
personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom
heat sources such as radiators orcookers
bull Do not drop
bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock
bull Switch o the phone in any area
where you are required by special
regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may
aect sensitive medical equipment
bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It
may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone
bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset
can become hot and create a irehazard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189
7
G ui d el i n e s
bull Pull o the road and park beore
making or answering a call i driving conditions so require
bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle
such as car stereos and saetyequipment
bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless
equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance
bull I you are listening to music whilst
out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads
Avoid damage to yourhearing
Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore
recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel
Glass Parts
Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device
is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289
LG TE365F | User Guide8
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
G ui d el i n e s
Blasting area
Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules
Potentially explosiveatmospheres
bull Do not use the phone at areueling point
bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store
lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories
In aircraft
Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat
bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat
bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew
Children
Keep the phone in a sae place
out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency
calls Check with your local serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389
9
G ui d el i n e s
Battery information and care
bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory
eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance
bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie
bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack
bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean
bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing
bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability
bull Do not expose the battery charger
to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom
bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate
the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the
battery is replaced by an incorrecttype
bull Dispose o used batteries
according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste
bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance
bull Always unplug the charger rom
the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489
LG TE365F | User Guide10
Getting to know your phone
Main screen
OK key
Left soft key
Go to the Emaildirectly
Call keyDials a phonenumber and
answersincoming calls
Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key
Navigation keysbull In standby mode
Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages
Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus
Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly
EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu
Clear key
Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen
Volume key
bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume
when it sets as General mode
Camera
Chargercablehandsfreeconnector
Memorycard slot
G e t t i n g t ok
n ow
y o ur ph on
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589
11
Open view
Left soft keyRight soft key
Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly
Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock
keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter
Change the text mode
(Capital Small)
Alpha numeric keys
Space KeyUse to enter space
while editingEnter key
OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions
Clear keybull Clears a
character witheach press
Hold the keydown to clearall inputs
bull Use this keyto go back to a previous
screen
Messagekey
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189
7
G ui d el i n e s
bull Pull o the road and park beore
making or answering a call i driving conditions so require
bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle
such as car stereos and saetyequipment
bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless
equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance
bull I you are listening to music whilst
out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads
Avoid damage to yourhearing
Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore
recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel
Glass Parts
Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device
is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289
LG TE365F | User Guide8
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
G ui d el i n e s
Blasting area
Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules
Potentially explosiveatmospheres
bull Do not use the phone at areueling point
bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store
lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories
In aircraft
Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat
bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat
bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew
Children
Keep the phone in a sae place
out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency
calls Check with your local serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389
9
G ui d el i n e s
Battery information and care
bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory
eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance
bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie
bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack
bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean
bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing
bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability
bull Do not expose the battery charger
to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom
bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate
the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the
battery is replaced by an incorrecttype
bull Dispose o used batteries
according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste
bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance
bull Always unplug the charger rom
the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489
LG TE365F | User Guide10
Getting to know your phone
Main screen
OK key
Left soft key
Go to the Emaildirectly
Call keyDials a phonenumber and
answersincoming calls
Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key
Navigation keysbull In standby mode
Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages
Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus
Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly
EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu
Clear key
Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen
Volume key
bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume
when it sets as General mode
Camera
Chargercablehandsfreeconnector
Memorycard slot
G e t t i n g t ok
n ow
y o ur ph on
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589
11
Open view
Left soft keyRight soft key
Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly
Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock
keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter
Change the text mode
(Capital Small)
Alpha numeric keys
Space KeyUse to enter space
while editingEnter key
OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions
Clear keybull Clears a
character witheach press
Hold the keydown to clearall inputs
bull Use this keyto go back to a previous
screen
Messagekey
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189
7
G ui d el i n e s
bull Pull o the road and park beore
making or answering a call i driving conditions so require
bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle
such as car stereos and saetyequipment
bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless
equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance
bull I you are listening to music whilst
out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads
Avoid damage to yourhearing
Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore
recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel
Glass Parts
Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device
is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289
LG TE365F | User Guide8
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
G ui d el i n e s
Blasting area
Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules
Potentially explosiveatmospheres
bull Do not use the phone at areueling point
bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store
lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories
In aircraft
Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat
bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat
bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew
Children
Keep the phone in a sae place
out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency
calls Check with your local serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389
9
G ui d el i n e s
Battery information and care
bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory
eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance
bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie
bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack
bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean
bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing
bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability
bull Do not expose the battery charger
to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom
bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate
the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the
battery is replaced by an incorrecttype
bull Dispose o used batteries
according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste
bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance
bull Always unplug the charger rom
the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489
LG TE365F | User Guide10
Getting to know your phone
Main screen
OK key
Left soft key
Go to the Emaildirectly
Call keyDials a phonenumber and
answersincoming calls
Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key
Navigation keysbull In standby mode
Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages
Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus
Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly
EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu
Clear key
Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen
Volume key
bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume
when it sets as General mode
Camera
Chargercablehandsfreeconnector
Memorycard slot
G e t t i n g t ok
n ow
y o ur ph on
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589
11
Open view
Left soft keyRight soft key
Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly
Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock
keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter
Change the text mode
(Capital Small)
Alpha numeric keys
Space KeyUse to enter space
while editingEnter key
OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions
Clear keybull Clears a
character witheach press
Hold the keydown to clearall inputs
bull Use this keyto go back to a previous
screen
Messagekey
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289
LG TE365F | User Guide8
Guidelines or sae and ef cient use
G ui d el i n e s
Blasting area
Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules
Potentially explosiveatmospheres
bull Do not use the phone at areueling point
bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store
lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories
In aircraft
Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat
bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat
bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew
Children
Keep the phone in a sae place
out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency
calls Check with your local serviceprovider
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389
9
G ui d el i n e s
Battery information and care
bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory
eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance
bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie
bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack
bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean
bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing
bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability
bull Do not expose the battery charger
to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom
bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate
the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the
battery is replaced by an incorrecttype
bull Dispose o used batteries
according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste
bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance
bull Always unplug the charger rom
the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489
LG TE365F | User Guide10
Getting to know your phone
Main screen
OK key
Left soft key
Go to the Emaildirectly
Call keyDials a phonenumber and
answersincoming calls
Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key
Navigation keysbull In standby mode
Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages
Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus
Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly
EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu
Clear key
Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen
Volume key
bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume
when it sets as General mode
Camera
Chargercablehandsfreeconnector
Memorycard slot
G e t t i n g t ok
n ow
y o ur ph on
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589
11
Open view
Left soft keyRight soft key
Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly
Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock
keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter
Change the text mode
(Capital Small)
Alpha numeric keys
Space KeyUse to enter space
while editingEnter key
OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions
Clear keybull Clears a
character witheach press
Hold the keydown to clearall inputs
bull Use this keyto go back to a previous
screen
Messagekey
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389
9
G ui d el i n e s
Battery information and care
bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory
eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance
bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie
bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack
bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean
bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing
bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability
bull Do not expose the battery charger
to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom
bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate
the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the
battery is replaced by an incorrecttype
bull Dispose o used batteries
according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste
bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance
bull Always unplug the charger rom
the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489
LG TE365F | User Guide10
Getting to know your phone
Main screen
OK key
Left soft key
Go to the Emaildirectly
Call keyDials a phonenumber and
answersincoming calls
Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key
Navigation keysbull In standby mode
Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages
Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus
Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly
EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu
Clear key
Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen
Volume key
bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume
when it sets as General mode
Camera
Chargercablehandsfreeconnector
Memorycard slot
G e t t i n g t ok
n ow
y o ur ph on
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589
11
Open view
Left soft keyRight soft key
Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly
Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock
keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter
Change the text mode
(Capital Small)
Alpha numeric keys
Space KeyUse to enter space
while editingEnter key
OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions
Clear keybull Clears a
character witheach press
Hold the keydown to clearall inputs
bull Use this keyto go back to a previous
screen
Messagekey
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489
LG TE365F | User Guide10
Getting to know your phone
Main screen
OK key
Left soft key
Go to the Emaildirectly
Call keyDials a phonenumber and
answersincoming calls
Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key
Navigation keysbull In standby mode
Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages
Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus
Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly
EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu
Clear key
Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen
Volume key
bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume
when it sets as General mode
Camera
Chargercablehandsfreeconnector
Memorycard slot
G e t t i n g t ok
n ow
y o ur ph on
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589
11
Open view
Left soft keyRight soft key
Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly
Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock
keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter
Change the text mode
(Capital Small)
Alpha numeric keys
Space KeyUse to enter space
while editingEnter key
OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions
Clear keybull Clears a
character witheach press
Hold the keydown to clearall inputs
bull Use this keyto go back to a previous
screen
Messagekey
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589
11
Open view
Left soft keyRight soft key
Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly
Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock
keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter
Change the text mode
(Capital Small)
Alpha numeric keys
Space KeyUse to enter space
while editingEnter key
OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions
Clear keybull Clears a
character witheach press
Hold the keydown to clearall inputs
bull Use this keyto go back to a previous
screen
Messagekey
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689
LG TE365F | User Guide12
Open view
Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch
Memory card slot
Camera lens
Battery
Mirror
O p envi e
w
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789
13
Installing the SIM card and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily
2 Remove the battery
Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment
WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may
damage the phone
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889
LG TE365F | User Guide14
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the
SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top
WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card
Installing the SIM card and battery
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989
15
4 Install the battery
Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals
on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089
LG TE365F | User Guide16
Installing the SIM card and battery
6 Charging your phone
Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your
TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen
WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea
I n s
t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er
y
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189
17
Memory card
Installing a memory card
You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card
TIP A memory card is an
optional accessory
Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover
until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards
Removing a memory card
Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the
ollowing diagram
M em or y c a r d
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289
LG TE365F | User Guide18
Memory card
Formatting a memory card
I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it
1 From the standby screen press
and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and
select External memory
3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000
as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use
4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and
select Media Choose Externalmemory
WARNING When youormat your memory card all
the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst
M em or y c a r
d
Y db
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389
19
Your standby screen
Y o u
r s t a n d b y s c r e e
n
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your
Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)
No network signal
Roaming service
WAP service is connected
An alarm is set
New message
New voice message
General proile in use
Silent proile in use
Vibrate proile in use
Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use
Remaining battery lie
Battery empty
Schedule is onExternal memory
G l F i
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489
LG TE365F | User Guide20
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
Without sliding your phone you
can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button
Making a Call
1 Make sure your phone is powered
on
2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply
press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to
erase the entire number
3 Press the [SEND] key to call the
number4 When inished press the [END]
key
Making a Call with the Send Key
1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed
2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad
3 Press the [SEND] key
Making International Calls
1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear
2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number
3 Press the [SEND] key
Ending a Call
When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589
21
Making a Call from the Contacts
You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts
You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key
Adjusting the Volume
During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone
In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys
Answering a Call
When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone
number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed
1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has
been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey
2 End the call by pressing the[END] key
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General F nctions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689
LG TE365F | User Guide22
Note You can answer a call while
using the Address Book or othermenu eatures
Vibrating Mode (Quick)
Vibrating Mode can be activated
by pressing and holding down thekey
Signal Strength
I you are inside a building being
near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen
Entering Text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a
message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered
The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone
Changing the Text Input Mode
Change the text input mode bypressing
You can check the current text input
mode in the upper right corner o the screen
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789
23
ABC Mode
This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is
displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)
Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner
Symbol Mode
The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters
To delete letters press Press and hold down to
continuously erase the letters
Note Pressing the [END] key will
save your unsaved message in theDrats older
Using the ABC Mode
Use the keypad keys to enter your
text
1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter
- When slide open one press is
one letter2 To insert a space press the
key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase
the letters
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
General Functions
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889
LG TE365F | User Guide24
Note Reer to the table below or
more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode
The 123 Mode enables you to
enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to
the appropriate text entry mode
General Functions
G en er a l F un c t i on
s
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989
25
In-Call Menu
Your phone provides a number
o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]
During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below
Making a Second Call
You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall
Swapping Between Two Calls
By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls
1 Press the [SEND] key
2 Press the let sot key and then
select Swap
Answering an Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply
press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will
show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it
I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key
I n- C a l l M en
u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089
LG TE365F | User Guide26
Rejecting an Incoming Call
You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key
Muting the Microphone
You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller
Using the Speakerphone
You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call
WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled
Conference Calls
The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The
conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature
A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active
and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the
conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu
The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to
the conerence call
I n- C a l l M en u
In-Call Menu
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189
27
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key
Setting Up a Conference Call
To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select
the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu
Activate the Conference Call onHold
To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key
Adding Calls to the Conference
CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption
Private Call in a Conference Call
To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish
to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call
The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing
the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u
Menu Tree
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289
LG TE365F | User Guide28
Menu Tree
1 Fido Shop
2 Media21 Images
22 Sounds
23 Videos
24 Documents
25 Others
26 External memory
3 GamesampApps31 Games
32 Applications
33 Network profile
4 Call History41 All calls
42 Missed calls
43 Dialled calls
44 Received calls
5 Internet
51 Home
52 Yahoo oneSearch
53 Bookmarks
54 Enter address
55 History56 Settings
57 Information
6 Messages
61 New message62 Inbox
63 Drafts
64 Outbox
65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail
67 Info messages
68 Templates
69 Settings
M en uT r e
e
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389
29
7 Tools
71 MP3 player
72 Camera
73 FM radio
74 Voice recorder
75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar
77 Memo
78 Calculator
79 Stopwatch
70 Unit converter
7 World clock
8 Contacts
81 Search82 New contact
83 Speed dials
84 Groups
85 Copy all
86 Delete all
87 Settings
88 Information
9 Settings
91 Profiles
92 DateampTime
93 Languages
94 Display
95 Call96 Connectivity
97 Security
98 Flight mode
99 Power save
90 Reset
9 Memory status
9 Phone Information
Fido IM1 Windows Live
2 Yahoo Messenger
0 MobileMail
CommunitiesM en uT r e e
Fido Shop
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489
LG TE365F | User Guide30
do S op
F i d o S h o p
Fido Shop provides access to buy
Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom
your phone
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589
31
M e d i a
Images Menu 21
Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet
Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone
Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone
Sounds Menu 22
Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site
Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone
Videos Menu 23
Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet
Documents Menu 24
This menu enables you to viewdocument iles
Media
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689
LG TE365F | User Guide32
Others Menu 25
When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older
The ollowing [Options] areavailable
Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth
File
New Folder Allows you to make anew older
MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile
Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type
External memory Menu 26
This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory
M e d i a
GamesampApps
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789
33
pp
G a m e s amp A p p
s
Games Menu 31
Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile
WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment
J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in
a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site
You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list
Applications Menu 32
This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu
Get New Apps
MobileMail
Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile
Call History
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889
LG TE365F | User Guide34
C a l l H i s t or y
All calls Menu 41
Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records
Missed calls Menu 42
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Dialled calls Menu 43
bull View the number i available and
call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number
and save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using this
numberbull Delete the call rom the list
Received calls Menu 44
bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact
bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact
bull Send a message using thisnumber
bull Delete the call rom the list
Internet
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989
35
I n t er n e
t
This menu shows how to access
the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser
Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices
Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider
To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]
The idle screen is displayed
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089
LG TE365F | User Guide36
M e s s a g e s
Messages
Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages
Sending a message
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New
message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu
2 Choose Message to send an SMS
or MMS
3 A new message editor will open
Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode
4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text
5 Select Options and choose Insert
to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)
6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press
Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your
contacts list You can add multiplecontacts
8 Select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189
M e s s a g e s
37
WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS
mode and you will be chargedaccordingly
Entering text
You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the
calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode
Note Some ields may allow only
one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)
To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options
Complete each word with a spaceby pressing
To delete a character press key
Fn key
Once Number mode
Twice Fn lock mode to keep using
Number mode
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289
LG TE365F | User Guide38
M e s s a g e s
Text input mode using the
keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers
In ABC mode you can enter
numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require
To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode
you want
Message folders
Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory
Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details
Drafts I you donrsquot have time to
inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere
Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent
Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489
LG TE365F | User Guide40
M e s s a g e s
CopyMove Choose copy or
move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone
Multi delete Delete selectedmessages
Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted
Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages
I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox
I you see the message No space
for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace
Using templates
You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish
1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates
2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates
3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via
4 Choose how you would like to
send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email
5 Choose a contact and selectSend
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589
M e s s a g e s
41
Changing your text message
settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Text message You can makechanges to
Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES
Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to receive
conirmation that your message wasdelivered
Reply charging Choose to be
billed or your message recipientrsquosreply
Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre
Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges
Send long text as Choose whether
to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield
Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or
GPRS
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689
LG TE365F | User Guide42
M e s s a g e s
Changing your multimedia
message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately
I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options
Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings
and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to
Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen
Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message
Validity period Choose how
long your message is stored at themessage centre
Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport
Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report
Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually
download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming
Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or
sending multimedia messages
Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789
Messages
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889
LG TE365F | User Guide44
M e s s a g e s
Info messages
Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices
Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the
speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received
When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that
you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed
When you have received an ino
service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen
P l T f i i i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989
T o ol s
45
MP3 player Menu 71
Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music
To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to
All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone
My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs
Settings Adjust your musicsettings
Transferring music into your
phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth
1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another
2 Select the music ile on the other
device and choose to send it viaBluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile should appear inAll songs
Pl i U i ti hil l i
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
46
Playing a song
1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player
2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select
3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next
song
5 Select to skip to the previoussong
6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu
TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the
volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys
Using options while playing
musicSelect Options and choose rom
Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing
View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to
Search Search or a track rom the
list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist
Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone
orMessage tone
Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to
Settings Change the Shule Play
mode or Equalizer settings
Creating a playlist Playing a playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189
T o ol s
47
Creating a playlist
You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older
1 Press and select Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save
4 The New playlist older will show
Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting
5 Select Save to store to theplaylist
Playing a playlist
1 Press Menu or and selectTools
2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist
3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect
Editing a playlist
From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist
I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using
the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select
Tools
2 Choose MP3 player then select
My playlist
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289
Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389
T o ol s
49
Camera Menu 72
Taking a quick photo
1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on
screen2 Holding the phone horizontally
point the lens towards the subjecto the photo
3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo
4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo
Note You can also access the
camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder
Before you ve taken your photo
Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows
you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o
Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically
in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events
White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in
your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode
Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
50
Colour effect Choose rom
our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative
EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the
image subject
After yoursquove taken your photo
Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the
image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen
OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved
New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current
photo will be saved
Set as Select to open a
sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID
Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message
Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See
page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos
Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos
Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589
T o ol s
51
Video camera Convert rom
camera mode to video cameramode
Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode
Resolution Choose one rom
320240 640480 1280960 and16001200
Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the
quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory
Shutter tone Select one o the
three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)
Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory
or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings
Changing the image size
You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want
to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller
1 Press Options and select
Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our
numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)
3 Press OK to implement your
changes
Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
52
g y d p
1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen
you should press Menu or then select Media and Images
2 Your gallery will appear on screen
3 Use the navigation keys to select
the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it
Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID
From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set
as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one
o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use
y
to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM
Shooting a quick video
1 Quickly press the camera key on
the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera
3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video
4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording
5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and
a timer will show the length o your video
6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume
7 Select Stop to stop recording
Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789
T o ol s
53
Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder
After yoursquove shot your video
The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let
side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved
New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved
Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded
Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia
message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message
Album Select to look at the
other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved
videos
Delete Delete the video you
have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear
Getting to know the viewfinder
Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone
Using the quick settings
Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos
Camera Convert rom video
camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889
FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989
T o ol s
55
Using the FM radio
Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the
moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger)
Voice recorder Menu 74
Using the voice recorder
Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds
Recording your voice memo
1 Press Menu or and select
Tools then choose Voicerecorder
2 Press to begin recording
recording4 Select Stop to end the recording
5 Select to listen to the recording
Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album
Sending a voice recording
1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options
2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be
added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon
TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
56
TIP I you plan to send your
recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording
mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message
Alarm clock Menu 75
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock
2 Select New
3 Scroll down and enter the time
you would like the alarm to soundat
4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like
your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday
you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile
6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a
new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or
the alarm or keep the suggestedname
8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms
Calendar Menu 76
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar
2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options
The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189
T o ol s
57
when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu
Edit Allows you to edit theschedules
Delete Allows you to delete the
selected schedule
New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule
Send via Send throught
Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth
Calendar Back to the calendarmenu
Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone
All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on
Go to date Allows you to jump to
speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once
schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules
Memo Menu 77
1 From the standby screen press
Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo
2 Select New and type your memo
3 Select Options then Save
4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application
TIP You can edit an existing
memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit
Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79
Tools
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289
LG TE365F | User Guide
T o ol s
58
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator
2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers
3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =
4 For more complex calculations
select Function to select acommand
5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch
2 Select Start to begin the timer
Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved
4 Select Stop to end the timer
5 Choose Resume to restart the
stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero
Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389
T o ol s
59
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter
2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity
3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to
enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity
4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the
unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow
1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock
2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent
3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area
4 Press Set
Contacts
Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489
LG TE365F | User Guide60
Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search
New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers
email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)
Speed dials Menu 83
This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure
speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers
This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure
a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address
Copy all Menu 85
You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa
SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory
Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard
C on t a c t s
Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589
61
You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone
Settings Menu 87
View options
Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number
With picture Set the phonebook
list with the inormation o characterand picture
Information Menu 88
Service dial numbers Use this
unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)
Own number (Depending on the
SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card
you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number
C on t a c t s
Settings
Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
62
your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you
Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20
Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to
activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset
Personalizing your profiles
You can personalise each proilesetting
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile
2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize
only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist
Changing your date amp time
You can set unctions relating to thedate and time
1 Press Menu or and select
Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose
rom the list below
Set date You can enter the current
dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)
Set time You can enter the current
time
Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789
S e t t i n g s
63
ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours
Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time
Changing the language
Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the
language input mode
Changing your display settings
1 Press Menu or and selectSettings
2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display
Clocks Choose to have the time
and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp
time or Normal
Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on
is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten
Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change
Shortcut Allows you to set
navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen
Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging
Theme Quickly change the whole
look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view
Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
64
typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number
Standby text Choose to add a
message to your standby screen
Changing your connectivitysettings
Your connectivity settings have
already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu
Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare
Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or
Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with
automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu
USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder
Changing your Bluetooth settings
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose
Bluetooth
2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to
My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989
S e t t i n g s
65
to Show or Hide your device toothers
My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F
My address View your Bluetooth
address
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important
inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select
Settings
2 Select Security and choose rom
the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on
Auto key lock Choose how long
beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use
code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately
Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2
code
Using flight mode
Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not
be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On
Using power save
Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO
Resetting your phone
Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction
Viewing memory status Phone Information
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
66
Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)
You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable
Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External
memory) in your TE365F
TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card
It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage
Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice
By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode
protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth
settings menu by selecting My
visibility then Show
2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New
3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen
4 Choose the device you want to
i i h lPair
d
Using your phone as a massstorage device
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189
S e t t i n g s
67
pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK
5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode
6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready
Using a Bluetooth headset
1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible
2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it
in pairing mode and pair yourdevices
3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to
headset proile
Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom
your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the
handset memory and externalmemory
1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity
2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select
OK
4 Insert the smaller end o the
USB bl i t th USB bl
Transferring a file to your phone
Y l t il
Settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289
LG TE365F | User Guide
S e t t i n g s
68
USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer
5 A removable disk older will open
automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card
6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders
7 Saely remove your phone by
clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar
8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press
Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile
You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth
1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to oneto another
2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth
3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes
4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on
type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older
Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory
To switch Bluetooth on
1 Press Menu or and select
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389
S e t t i n g s
69
Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls
Beore you start sharing iles using
Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another
Bluetooth device on page 66
1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth
2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o
To send a file
1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo
video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send
via then Bluetooth
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i
it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically
search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range
5 Choose the device you want to
send the ile and select Send
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489
Fido IM
The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or
Offline Menu
Sign in
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589
71
F i d oI M
o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and
Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status
The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities
support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger
Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password
Note Once the User ID and
Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional
Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations
Change Provider You can changethe provider
Settings
Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session
Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login
Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power
When cursor is located on aConversations List
N t Th C ti Li t
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689
LG TE365F | User Guide72
choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options
Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address
inormation
IM Information
This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client
Name and Version Number
Online Menu 1 to 1conversation
Ater a successul Login a list o
contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable
Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown
contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session
F i d oI M
Settings
bull Display Name
When cursor is located on aConversation
End Conversation This closes
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789
73
Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your
status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline
bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session
bull Auto Sign In You may Login to
an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions
bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to
loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout
process
End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact
Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation
Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minimize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M
When cursor is located on aContact List
Add Contact This adds a new
When cursor is located on aContact
Add Contact This adds a new
Fido IM
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889
LG TE365F | User Guide74
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts
Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or
conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail
Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact
BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact
Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text
Blocked List
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Minumize Minimize the activewindow
F i d oI M
Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess
Note
bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989
75
Menu options available in theConversation screen
Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts
Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen
BlockUnblock Contact This allows
or blocks conversation with theselected Contact
Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation
End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer
Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu
Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123
supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending
bull The present inormation might not
update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus
F i d oI M
MobileMail
Mobile Email allows you to access
Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows
Live Hotmail and Other providers
Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089
LG TE365F | User Guide76
M o b i l eM a i l
e ot a a d Ot e p o de s
accounts on your phone So now
you can quickly and easily check your
email while you are away rom your
computer
To Set Up Mobile Email
Open Mobile Email From the
Standby screen press the let sot
key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail
Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select
Log In
1 Type your existing email ID into ID
entry ield
2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield
t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case
3 Select Sign In
Opening an Email Just scroll down
and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or
Mark Unread
Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete
The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone
Communities
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189
77
C omm uni t i e s
g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live
PC Sync
You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match
5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC
Suite Installer wizard
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289
LG TE365F | User Guide78
P C S y n c
and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease
Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer
1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings
2 Select Connection then select
USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode
Others Data Service mode
3 Insert the supplied CD into your
PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen
4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click
LG PC Suite
6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop
Connecting your phone andPC
1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC
2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop
3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB
4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected
Viewing your phone files on
your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as
Synchronising your contacts
1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389
79
P C S y n c
1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above
2 Click on the Contents icon
3 All o the videos audios and
graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older
TIP Viewing the contents o
your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need
2 Click on the Contacts icon
3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset
4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to
Note To backup contacts saved
to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to
Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed
Synchronising your
messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect
Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met
Microsot Windows XP or Vista
PC Sync
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489
LG TE365F | User Guide80
your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Messages icon
3 All o your PC and phone
messages will be displayed inolders on your screen
4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange
messages
Synchronising your music
1 Connect your phone to your PC
2 Click on the Music icon
3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older
Windows Media Player 11 orhigher
USB Connection mode should
be active and Music Sync modeshould be on
Using your phone as a massstorage device
Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted
1 Disconnect your phone rom your
PC2 From the standby screen press
and choose Settings
3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode
4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP
C S y n c
5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting
as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589
81
Connected as Mass Storage
Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser
6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive
Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate
Mass Storage
Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory
To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync
P C S y n c
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889
Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures
Phone cannot
OnO key pressed toobriely
Press OnO key or at least twoseconds
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings
862019 User Guide 1689
httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989
85
T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g
Phone cannotbe switched on
briely
Battery empty
Battery contacts dirty
Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display
Clean contacts
Charging error
Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range
Contact problem
No mains voltage
Charger deective
Wrong charger
Battery deective
Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again
Check power supply and connection
to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary
Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage
I the charger does not warm upreplace it
Only use original LG accessories
Replace battery
Phone losesnetwork
Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic
Number notpermitted
The Fixed dial numberunction is on
Check settings